Download Samsung HT-F456K دليل المستخدم
Transcript
HT-F456K ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﺧﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﻛﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﻙ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ Samsungﻫﺫﺍ. ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻛﻣﻝ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ www.samsung.com/register 2014/3/21 8:58:07 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 1 ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ،ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ(. ﻓﻼ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ .ﻭﺇﻧﻣﺎ ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﺭﻙ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻫﻠﻳﻥ. ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻣﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ "ﺟﻬﺩ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺧﻁﻳﺭ" ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺳﺩﻳﺔ. ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ :ﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ، ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺃﺣﻛﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ • ﻟﻠﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁﺭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ،ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻸﻣﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ. CLASS 1 KLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 KLASS 1 PRODUCTO ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. LASER PRODUCT LASER PRODUKT LASER LAITE LASER APPARAT LÁSER CLASE 1 ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ • • • • ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺎﺛﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ،ﻛﺂﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ً ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ. ﺃﻥ ﻳﻅﻝ ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ. ٍ ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ،ﻳﺟﺏ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ً ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. |۲ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻳﺯﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ 1 ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻛﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻳﺯﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ .1 ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺭﺓ. ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ • ﺗﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻳﺯﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ،ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺷﻌﺎﻉ. ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 2014/3/21 8:58:48 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 2 ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ - - ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ. - ﺍﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺣﻪ. ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ.• ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ - ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺭﻛﺕ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺫﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ،ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻪ ﺑﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻣﺧﻔﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻅﻑ ﺧﻔﻳﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ،ﻭﺍﻣﺳﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ. - ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ،ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ. ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ. ﺍﺗﺭﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ. ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ. ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ • • • • ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ۰۱ • ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻭﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ. • ﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﺑﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ .Dolby Laboratories ﺗﻌﺩ Dolbyﻭﺭﻣﺯ Dﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻣﻠﻭﻛﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ .Dolby Laboratories ،HDMIﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ High-Definition Multimedia Interface ،HDMI ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ HDMI Licensing LLCﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ. ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻛﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ Rovi .Corporationﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ Independent .JPEG Group ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ OpenSSL .Project ﻗﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ © 2013ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ .Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ. ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ • • • • • ﺣﻭﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ DIVX®: DivXﻫﻭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺃﻧﺷﺄﺗﻪ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ DivX, ،LLCﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ .Rovi ً ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﺭﺳﻣﻳًﺎ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ®DivX Certified ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎﺋﻪ .ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣُﺷ ّﻐﻝ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ .DivXﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ www.divx.comﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ .DivX ﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ :DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMANDﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺧﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ® DivX Certifiedﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ DivXﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻠﺏ ) (VODﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ .ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﺳﻡ DivX VODﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ .ﺍﺫﻫﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ vod.divx.comﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻙ. DivX Certifiedﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ® ،DivXﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯ. ﺗﻌﺩ ® DivXﻭ® DivX Certifiedﻭﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ Rovi Corporationﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ. ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: .7,519,274 ;7,515,710 ;7,460,668 ;7,295,673 ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ .ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ،ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ،ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ .VCRﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ VCRﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ. ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۳ 2014/3/21 8:58:49 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 3 ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ۲ ۳ ۳ ۳ ۳ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻗﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ۱۸ ۱۸ ۱۸ ۱۸ ۱۸ ۱۸ ۱۸ ٥ ٦ ٦ ۷ ۷ ۸ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ۱۰ ۱۳ ۱٤ ۱٥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ۱٦ ۱٦ ۱٦ ۱٦ ۱٦ ۱۷ ۱۷ ۱۷ ۱۷ ۱۷ ۱۷ ۱۷ ۱۷ ۱۷ ۱۸ ۱۸ ۱۸ ۱۸ ۱۸ ۱۸ |٤ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Settingsﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ BD Wise ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ HDMI ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )ﺧﻳﺎﺭ( ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ) DRCﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ( ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ EQﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻭﻛﻲ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )DivX(R ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺃﺑﻭﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ USB ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ )DivX(R ۱۹ ۱۹ ۱۹ ۱۹ ۲۱ ۲۲ ۲۳ ۲۳ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ (CD-DA)/MP3/WMA ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ JPEG ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ USB ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ USB ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ۲٤ ۲٥ ۲۷ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ OpenSSL ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ. ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺗﻳﻥ ﺃ .ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﻠﺑﻙ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻠﺑﻙ ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ )ﺃﻱ ﻋﺟﺯﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ(. ﺏ .ﺇﺣﺿﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻭﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ )ﺃﻱ ﻋﺟﺯﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ(. ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺑﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﻣﺑﻠﻎ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻝ. ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 2014/3/21 8:58:51 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 4 ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺕ MP3 ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻣﻥ ۸۰ﺇﻟﻰ ۳۲۰ ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺑﺎﻳﺕ/ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ DVD ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVD-Videoﺃﻭ DVD±R/±RW WMA ﻣﻥ ٥٦ﺇﻟﻰ ۱۲۸ ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺑﺎﻳﺕ/ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ CD ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ).(CD DA ،CD-R/-RW AC3 ﻣﻥ ۱۲۸ﺇﻟﻰ ۳۸٤ ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺑﺎﻳﺕ/ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ DivX DVD±R/±RW, CD-R/-RW ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ MP3 CD-R/-RW ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ JPEG CD-R/-RW ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ • LD, CD-G/-I/-ROM, DVD-ROM/-RAM | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺳﺗﺟﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻷﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻭﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ .ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﻳﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﻻ ﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ Samsungﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻳﺣﻣﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺃﻭ ،CDﻷﻥ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺗﺗﻁﻭﺭ ،ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻭﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺃﻭ CDﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ. ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﻼء ﺷﺭﻛﺔ SAMSUNGﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺗﻙ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺃﻭ CDﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ .ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ،ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻗﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ .DTS • • • • ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ٤٤٫۱ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ۰۲ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ٤۸/٤٤٫۱ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ :ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ 576×720ﺑﻛﺳﻝ .ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ .800 ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻥ 48ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ً ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. 320ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺑﺎﻳﺕ/ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ،ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ .DivX ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ DivX .Networks, Incﻓﻘﻁ ،ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ DivXﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ. ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ DVD-VIDEO AUDIO-CD DivX ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻡ .ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﻭﺍﺩ ،ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ. ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ AVI DivX3.11~DivX6.8 WMV V1/V2/V3/V7 ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ٥ 2014/3/21 8:58:53 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 5 ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ 1 ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻛﻧﺩﺍ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ 2 ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ،ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻥ ،ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻁ ،ﻣﺻﺭ، ﺟﻧﻭﺏ ﺇﻓﺭﻳﻘﻳﺎ ،ﺟﺭﻳﻥ ﻻﻧﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺕ – 3 ﺗﺎﻳﻭﺍﻥ ،ﻛﻭﺭﻳﺎ ،ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺑﻳﻥ ،ﺇﻧﺩﻭﻧﻳﺳﻳﺎ، ﻫﻭﻧﺞ ﻛﻭﻧﺞ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ – – ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ 640x480 – – ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ – 44.1kHz 44.1kHz DVD-VIDEO 4 ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺳﻳﻙ ،ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﻭﺑﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ،ﺃﺳﺗﺭﺍﻟﻳﺎ ،ﻧﻳﻭﺯﻳﻠﻧﺩﺍ ،ﺟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﻱ ،ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﻳﺑﻲ 5 ﺭﻭﺳﻳﺎ ،ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻗﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩ ،ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺇﻓﺭﻳﻘﻳﺎ ،ﻛﻭﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ،ﻣﻧﻐﻭﻟﻳﺎ 6 ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ JPG MP3 WMA WMV DivX JPG .JPEG MP3. WMA. WMV. AVI. 320~80 kbps 128~56 kbps 4Mbps 4Mbps V8 ,V1,V2 V3,V7 ~DivX3.11 DivX6.8 720x576 44.1KHz~ 48KHz | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺗﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ JPEGﺩﻗﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ DVD ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﻻ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ،ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ. ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ USB • • • • • • • • • • • • • ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ :ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ،USBﻣﺷﻐﻝ ،MP3ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ 10ﺃﺣﺭﻑ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ. ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ 300ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﻳﺩ. ﺟﻬﺎﺯ /USBﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ،ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ USBﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ. ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ FAT16ﻭ FAT32ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ USBﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ .ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ .USB ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ. ﺑﺭﻭﺗﻭﻛﻭﻝ PTPﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ. ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ "ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ". ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3/WMAﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ DRMﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ. ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ. ﻳﺑﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ USBﻫﻭ 500ﻣﻳﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺟﻬﺩ 5ﻓﻭﻟﺕ(. ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ. |٦ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ FM FUNCTION TV SOURCE RECEIVER FOOTBALL TV 3 6 9 DSP/EQ DVD 2 1 5 4 8 7 V-SURROUND 0 MUTE MIC VOL + TUNING / CH TV SOUND VOL MIC VOL TITLE MENU DISC MENU HOME TOOLS INFO b # EXIT RETURN USB REC S/W LEVEL D C P.BASS S.VOL B A DIMMER GIGA MY KARAOKE REPEAT MO/ST ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ TUNER MEMORY SLEEP KEYCON ECHO ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ/ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺑﺣﺟﻡ (AAA ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ) HDMIﺧﻳﺎﺭ( ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 2014/3/21 8:58:54 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 6 ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ) ( , ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ) ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ) ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ( ﻓﺗﺢ/ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ) ( 5V 500mA ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ * ﻣﻭﺻﻝ AUX IN 1 ( MIC 1 ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ۰۲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ AUX IN 1 MIC 2 ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ) ( ( ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ USBﻣﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ )(MIC * ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻕ( ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ AUX IN 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ .MP3ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ .AUX 1 ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ( ) FA NETﻟﻠﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ( ﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺧﺭﺝ HDMI * ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ FM ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ HDMI OUT VIDEO OUT ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ SPEAKERS OUT AUX IN 2 FM ANT FA NET )(Only For Service OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN SURROUND SUBWOOFER SURROUND * ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ FM . 1ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ FMﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ .FM . 2ﺣﺭﻙ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺑﻁء ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻌﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ،ﺛﻡ ﺃﺣﻛﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺳﻁﺢ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻠﺏ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ۱۰ﺳﻡ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ .ﻻ ﺗﻌﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ. ﻻ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺙ .AM ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۷ 2014/3/21 8:58:58 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 7 ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ ﺟﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ. ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ. FUNCTION TV SOURCE ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ. RECEIVER FOOTBALL TV ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ. DVD 3 2 1 6 5 4 8 7 9 DSP/EQ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ) Virtual Surroundﺇﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ) On/Offﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ. ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ. MUTE ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ FMﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﻭﺍﺕ. ﺃﻭ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ. ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ Home ) Theaterﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ. ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ )ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ( ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ. MIC VOL + TUNING / CH TV SOUND ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) P.BASSﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺭﺹ. ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ) MONOﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﻭ STEREO )ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ( ﻟﺑﺙ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ. ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. |۸ VOL ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. MIC VOL TITLE MENU DISC MENU HOME ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ. TOOLS INFO # ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ. ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ .USB ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣُﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ. V-SURROUND 0 ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔEQ/ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ. ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ) Home Theaterﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ( ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ .DVD b EXIT RETURN USB REC S/W LEVEL D C P.BASS S.VOL B A DIMMER GIGA MY KARAOKE REPEAT MO/ST TUNER MEMORY SLEEP KEYCON ECHO ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ/ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ. ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ. ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ) Key Controlﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ( )(b, # ﻟﺧﻔﺽ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ. ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ DVD ) Home Theaterﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ (DVDﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺻﻔﺢ ) Photo Listﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(. ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .GIGA Sound ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺳﻛﻭﻥ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ FMﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ. ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ KEYCONﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ Key ) Controlﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ(. ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 2014/3/21 8:59:00 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 8 AAAsize: ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ: ﺣﺟﻡ Battery AAA ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺩ 58 ,57 ,56 MTC 18 Nikei 03 AOC Bell & Howell ((M.Wards 15 ,01 ,05 ,04 ,03 ,02 ,01 ,11 ,10 ,09 ,08 ,07 ,06 14 ,13 ,12 48 ,40 ,18 ,01 NEC 60 ,59 ,40 ,20 ,19 ,18 Onking 03 81 ,58 ,57 Onwa 03 Brocsonic 60 ,59 Panasonic Candle 18 Penney Cetronic 03 Philco Citizen 25 ,18 ,03 Philips Cinema Classic Concerto Contec Coronado 97 03 18 46 15 Pioneer Portland Proton Quasar Radio Shack Craig 84 ,83 ,82 ,61 ,05 ,03 RCA/Proscan Croslex Crown 62 03 Realistic Sampo Curtis Mates 63 ,61 ,59 Samsung CXC Sanyo ,66 ,54 ,09 ,08 ,07 ,06 74 ,73 ,67 18 ,54 ,48 ,18 ,17 ,15 ,03 90 ,69 ,62 ,59 ,48 ,40 ,18 ,17 ,15 72 ,62 ,54 91 ,80 ,66 ,63 59 ,18 ,15 40 67 ,66 ,06 75 ,61 ,60 ,56 ,48 ,17 ,78 ,77 ,76 ,67 ,59 ,18 94 ,93 ,92 19 ,03 40 ,43 ,40 ,17 ,16 ,15 ,00 ,49 ,48 ,47 ,46 65 ,61 ,19 Fisher Funai Futuretech General (Electric (GE Hall Mark Hitachi Inkel JC Penny JVC KTV KEC KMC Admiral ((M.Wards A Mark Anam | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ " "+ﻭ" "-ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ. ﺑﺎﻓﺗﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ،ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ. ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ۷ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺧﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ. ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺣﺭﻗﻬﺎ. ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭ .ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻛﻳﻛﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ. ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ. ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ. ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ . 1ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ) TVﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ /DVDﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ( ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. . 2ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) POWERﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ﻣﺔ. . 3ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) POWERﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ،ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ. • ﻣﺛﺎﻝ :ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ Samsung ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) POWERﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(، ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 00ﻭ 15ﻭ 16ﻭ 17ﻭ.40 . 4ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﻳﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ) TV POWERﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ( ﻭ ) VOLUMEﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﻭ) CHANNELﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ( ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻣﻥ 0ﺇﻟﻰ .(9 03 ,17 ,16 ,15 ,04 ,03 ,02 ,23 ,22 ,21 ,20 ,19 ,18 ,28 ,27 ,26 ,25 ,24 ,36 ,35 ,34 ,32 ,30 ,29 90 ,59 ,48 40 03 ,61 ,59 ,46 ,40 ,15 ,03 85 ,84 ,83 ,82 ,64 65 ,19 03 03 ,66 ,59 ,56 ,40 ,06 68 ,67 40 69 ,59 ,50 ,18 ,15 45 86 ,67 ,59 ,56 70 88 ,87 ,61 ,59 40 ,15 ,03 15 SSS 18 Sylvania Symphonic Tatung Techwood Teknika TMK Toshiba Vidtech 62 ,60 ,59 ,54 ,48 ,40 ,18 96 ,95 ,61 06 18 25 ,18 ,15 ,03 40 ,18 71 ,63 ,57 ,19 18 (LG (Goldstar ,38 ,37 ,17 ,16 ,15 ,01 44 ,43 ,42 ,41 ,40 ,39 Videch 69 ,60 ,59 Luxman 18 Wards (LXI (Sears ,62 ,60 ,59 ,56 ,54 ,19 71 ,65 ,63 ,59 ,54 ,48 ,18 ,17 ,15 89 ,72 ,62 ,60 54 ,40 54 40 ,18 ,48 ,40 ,18 ,17 ,15 64 ,60 ,54 Yamaha 18 York 40 Yupiteru Zenith Zonda 03 79 ,58 01 75 ,60 ,59 ,40 ,18 Dongyang 54 ,03 Daewoo Daytron Dynasty Emerson | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ﻭﺳﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ Samsungﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ. Magnavox Marantz Matsui MGA Mitsubishi/ MGA Scott 61 ,60 ,40 ,03 Sears Sharp Signature 2000 ((M.Wards Sony Soundesign Spectricon 19 ,18 ,15 64 ,57 ,15 ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ۰۲ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ 58 ,57 55 ,53 ,52 ,51 ,50 40 ,03 01 ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۹ 2014/3/21 8:59:03 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 9 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻁﺭ ًﻗﺎ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ. ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ. ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ : ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ : ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻳﻁﻳﺔ )ﻳﻣﻳﻥ( ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ )ﻳﻣﻳﻥ( ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻳﻁﻳﺔ )ﻳﻣﻳﻥ( ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ )ﻳﺳﺎﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ )ﻳﻣﻳﻥ( ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ )ﻳﺳﺎﺭ( ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻳﻁﻳﺔ )ﻳﺳﺎﺭ( ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻳﻁﻳﺔ )ﻳﺳﺎﺭ( ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ 2.5ﺇﻟﻰ 3ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ﻣﺛﺎﻝ :ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ 32ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ 2ﺇﻟﻰ 2.4ﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ 55ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ 3.5ﺇﻟﻰ 4ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺿﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ،ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ ) 45ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﻙ .ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ .ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻠﻳﻝ. ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺗﻪ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ. ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ،ﺿﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ .ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ 60ﺇﻟﻰ 90ﺳﻡ ،ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﻘﻠﻳﻝ. * ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ،ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ. ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻻ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ .ﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ. | ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ | ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻳﻠﻌﺑﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ .ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻠﺣﻕ ﺑﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻘﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ. ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻳﺔ ).(–/+ ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺩﻳﻬﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﺭﻯ )ﻓﺗﺣﺔ( ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺭﻯ )ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ(. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻟﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﻓﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. | ۱۰ 2014/3/21 8:59:05 ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 10 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ۰۳ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ HT-F456K HT-F456K )ﻳﻣﻳﻥ( )ﻳﺳﺎﺭ( ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ )EA ۱٦ :(٥X۱٥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ )ﻳﻣﻳﻥ( )ﻳﺳﺎﺭ( ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ . 1ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ. . 2ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ )–( ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ) ،(+ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ. . 3ﺻﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ. ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۱۱ 2014/3/21 8:59:07 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 11 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻧﺔ . 1ﺍﻗﻠﺏ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺭﺃﺳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺏ ﻭﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ. . 2ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻙ ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ. | ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ | ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻋﺯﻡ ،ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ .ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ. )ﻣﻔﻙ ﻋﺯﻡ – ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ 15ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻡ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺳﻡ( . 3ﺍﻓﺭﺩ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ. . 4ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ. . 5ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ. ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ. . 6ﻫﻛﺫﺍ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ .ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ. ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ )ﻳﻣﻳﻥ( ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ )ﻳﺳﺎﺭ( VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT SPEAKERS OUT VOLTAGE 115 SEL. AUX IN 2 FM ANT FA NET )(Only For Service OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN SURROUND SUBWOOFER SURROUND ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ )ﻳﺳﺎﺭ( ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ )ﻳﻣﻳﻥ( ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ | ۱۲ 2014/3/21 8:59:23 ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 12 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) TV SOURCEﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ( ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ،ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ) ،HDMIﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ،ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ( ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ۰۳ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ۱ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ .۲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ۲ VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT SPEAKERS OUT AUX IN 2 FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN SURROUND SUBWOOFER SURROUND ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ۱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ۱ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ – HDMIﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ )ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ( ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ HDMIﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ )ﺧﻳﺎﺭ( HDMI OUTﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺩﺧﻝ HDMIﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ۲ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ – ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ VIDEO OUTﺑﻣﺅﺧﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺱ VIDEO INﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ .VCRﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺑﺄﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ. ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ )) Anynet+(HDMI-CECﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ Samsungﻓﻘﻁ( ﺗﻣﺛﻝ Anynet+ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ Samsungﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ .Samsungﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ Anynet+ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ SAMSUNGﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ .HDMI | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ Anynet+ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ. ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ HDMIﻻ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ .CEC ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﺭ ) Anynet+ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻳﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ Anynet+ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .(Anynet+ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۱۳ 2014/3/21 8:59:26 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 13 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ،ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ: FM USB AUX 2 AUX 1 D.IN DVD/CD )ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻕ(. VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ۱ ﺃﺣﻣﺭ R ﺃﺑﻳﺽ W AUX IN 2 FM ANT OPTICAL AUDIO OUT DIGITAL AUDIO IN ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ DIGITAL OUT )ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻕ(. ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ۲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ :AUX 2 ۱ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ) AUX IN 2ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ. ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ .AUX 2 | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ 8ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ) AUXﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ( ،ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ۲ﺑﺻﺭﻱ :ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ) DIGITAL AUDIO INﺿﻭﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ. ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ .D.IN ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ) OPTICALﺑﺻﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ 25ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ،ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. | ۱٤ 2014/3/21 8:59:28 ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 14 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ۰۳ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﻣﻠﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺍﻭﻛﻲ ﻭﺃﻧﺕ ﺗﻧﻌﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺗﻙ. ﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻭﺃﻧﺷﺩ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺣﺑﺔ. . 1ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ) (MICﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﻳﻥ. . 2ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) MIC VOLﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ( ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ. . 3ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) ECHOﺻﺩﻯ( ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ. MIC 1 . 4ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ،KEYCONﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ).(b/# ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) (#ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ،ﻳﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) (bﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ،ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ. MIC 2 . 5ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ MY KARAOKEﻟﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ .ﻭﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ،ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ :ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ. ✎ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻣﻌﺕ ﺃﺻﻭﺍ ًﺗﺎ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ )ﺿﺟﻳﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺭﺍﺥ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻭﻛﻲ ،ﻓﺄﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ .ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻣﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ. ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ) AUXﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ( ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ) TUNERﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻟﻑ(. ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ) Speaker Selectionﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ) TV Speakerﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ( ،ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ. ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ my karaokeﺃﻭ ،keyconﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ S.VOL/P.BASS/DSP(EQ)/ .GIGA/FOOTBALL/V-SURROUND ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ MY KARAOKEﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ،D.IN/DIVXﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ KEYCONﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ .D.IN/DIVX/USB/MP3/WMA ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،ﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ my karaokeﺃﻭ .keycon ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ MY KARAOKEﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ،ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ KEYCONﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ. # b TUNER MEMORY MY KARAOKE MO/ST KEYCON ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۱٥ 2014/3/21 8:59:30 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 15 ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) POWERﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ. ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ. ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ) Settingsﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ۱ ▲▼ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ( E ) ▼▲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ( E ) ▼▲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ( .E ۳ Initial settings > On-Screen Language Select a language for the on-screen displays b # ۲ ٤ English 한국어 Nederlands Fran ais Deutsch Italiano " Select ۱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ :ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ. ۲ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻋﻭﺩﺓ :ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ۳ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) Eﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( /ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ: • ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ▲▼►◄ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ Eﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ. ٤ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺧﺭﻭﺝ :ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ. >Move | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ،ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ HDMIﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ،ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ،ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ. ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ HDMIﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ .ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Settingsﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( . 1ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) POWERﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ(. Settings ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ • :Pan-Scan 4:3ﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ 16:9ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻓﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺩﻭﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ .4:3 • :Letter Box 4:3ﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ 16:9ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻓﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ،DVDﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ .4:3 • :Wide 16:9ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ 16:9ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ. BD Wise DVD/CD Function . 2ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ►◄ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ) Settingsﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ .Eﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Settingsﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ(. . 3ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ) Settingsﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﻭﻗﻭﺍﺋﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. | ۱٦ 2014/3/21 8:59:37 ﺗﻌﺩ BD Wiseﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻥ .Samsung ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ Samsungﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ BD-Wiseﻋﺑﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ،HDMIﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ BD Wiseﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﻳُﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺭﺹ .DVD | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ, ﻗﺭﺹ ,DVDﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ( ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ Samsungﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ .BD Wise ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 16 ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ .HDMIﻭﺗﺷﻳﺭ iﻭﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻣﻲ ,ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ. • 576p(480p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p, BD Wise | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ BD Wiseﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ BD Wiseﻋﻠﻰ On )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(. ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ HDMIﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ .ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ,ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ .576i/480i ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ 1080ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ HDMI ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﺧﺭﺝ HDMIﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ )ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(. ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )ﺧﻳﺎﺭ( ﺗﻁﺑﻕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ NTSCﻭ.PAL ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ .ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ: ) Settings .۱ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ) Audio ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( Simple Setup )ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ( ) Settings .۲ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ) System ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ( Initial Setting )ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ( ) Simple Speaker Setup ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ( • ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ :ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻙ. • ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ :ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻙ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ) Simple Modeﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ( ،ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ) Speaker Settingﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ( .ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ▲▼ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ►◄ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ۰٤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،BD Wiseﻳﺟﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ BDﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ. ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ BD Wiseﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ BD .Wise ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ،ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ "ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ" ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ .5.1 ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ً ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ. ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ،AC-3ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ 00ﻭ 15ﻣﻳﻠﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ 00ﻭ 5ﻣﻳﻠﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ. ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ 5.1ﻓﻘﻁ. ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻉ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ►◄ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ) Onﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(. • ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ Front Center Front Left Surround Left Surround Right Right Subwooferﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ. ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ,ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ .E ) DRCﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ( ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋًﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿًﺎ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ Dolby Digitalﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻳﻼً. ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﺄﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ. ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ • ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ،HDMIﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ. ﺣﺩﺩ ) Home Theaterﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ(. • ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ HDMIﻓﻘﻁ ،ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻘﻁ .ﺣﺩﺩ ) TV Speakerﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ(. ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ ،ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ. ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۱۷ 2014/3/21 8:59:41 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 17 ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ. ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺻﻭﺕ HDMIﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ 2ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. EQﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ. ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻭﻛﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻭﻛﻲ. • ) Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( :ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻭﻛﻲ. • ) Onﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( :ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﺿﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ,ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ. ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ،ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ .ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ www.samsung.comﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻣﻼء .Samsung | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ "ﺃﺧﺭﻯ" ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻧﺹ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ،D.IN/USB/DIVX/MP3/WMAﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻭﻛﻲ. ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻭﻛﻲ. ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ HDMIﻭﺍﺣﺩ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ،ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) Audio Return Channelﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ(. ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ HDMIﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) ARCﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ. ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ARCﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .ARC ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ARCﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ D.INﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ARCﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ 25ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ،ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﻱ ﺟﻧﺑًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺷﺎﻫﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺗﻙ. ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ. ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺃﺑﻭﻱ ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ .ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ .E • ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ " "0000ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ. ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ 4ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺳﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ . 1ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ. ﻧﻅﺎﻡ . 2ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) STOPﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ) (ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ 5ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ. ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ) Initial Settingsﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ( ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ language )ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( ﻭ) TV aspectﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ( ﻭ) Simple Setupﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ() .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (۱٦ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )DivX(R ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ. ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻭﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ DivX(R) VODﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ )DivX(R .VOD | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ) OKﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ( .ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ، ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ DivX(R) Deactivationﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ).DivX(R ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ،ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ .DivX ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ )DivX(R ﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ. | ۱۸ 2014/3/21 8:59:43 ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 18 ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ JPEG ﺿﻊ ﻗﺭﺻًﺎ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ . ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ) ◄► JPEGﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ) ▼▲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ( ) ▼▲ E ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ( E | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ،ﻳﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ،ﻟﺫﺍ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ً ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ،ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻫﺎ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ (.DVD ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﺎﺕ CSS )ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ :ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ(. ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ 5ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ( ،ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ 20ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ،ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ) .ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ( ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ (CD-DA)/ MP3/WMA . 1ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ) (CD-DAﺃﻭ ﻗﺭﺹ MP3ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ. • ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ,ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. ﺑﺣﺙ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ/ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ. ﻻ ﻳُﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭ ًﺗﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ 1ﻭ. 2 ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ CD-DAﻓﻘﻁ. ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ/ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ - ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼►◄ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .E ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ - ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ/ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ. ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ،MP3/WMAﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ►◄ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ,ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .E ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ #$ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ/ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ. . 2ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) GREENﺃﺧﺿﺭ() (Bﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ) YELLOWﺃﺻﻔﺭ()(C ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ". ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ .#$ • ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ,ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ )ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ( ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ. • ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻓﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ. • • ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻭﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ .ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ . ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ,ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ/ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ ► ◄،ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ. ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ MP3/WMAﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ،ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ. ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺭﺹ MP3ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ MP3/WMAﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ. ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .WMA-DRM ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ 25ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ. ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ۰٥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء. ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺳﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ. ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ .DivX/DVD ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ • ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳﺔ. ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ .DivX/DVD ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۱۹ 2014/3/25 9:40:47 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 19 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ 5ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ A-B ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ,ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ►◄. • ﻳﺗﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ 5ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ►. • ﻳﺗﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ 5ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ◄. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺑﻘﺭﺹ DVDﺃﻭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟـ DivXﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ. ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ /ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ, ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ▲▼► ◄ E • ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ :ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ,ﻭﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ ,ﻭﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ,ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ. • ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ :ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ, ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺹ ,ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ. ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ DVD/DivX ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ,ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ )ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ (A-Bﺑﺄﻗﺭﺍﺹ .DVD/DivX . 1ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) REPEATﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ. . 2ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ,DVDﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ▲▼ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ .A- ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) REPEATﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ . . 3ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ Eﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻧﺩﻩ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ).(A . 4ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ Eﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻧﺩﻩ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ).(B . 5ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ: ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ،DVDﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) REPEATﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ( ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ .ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) REPEATﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ( ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ . | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) A-B Repeatﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ (A-Bﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DivXﺃﻭ MP3ﺃﻭ .JPEG ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ . 1ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ,ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) TOOLSﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ( ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ. . 2ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ▲▼ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ. . 1ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ،DVD/DivXﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ REPEAT )ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ( ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ. . 3ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ►◄ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .E • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ. . 2ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ▲▼ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .E . 4ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ,ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) TOOLSﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ( ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ً ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ. . 3ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ▲▼ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ) OFFﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ,ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .E | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ. ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ CD/MP3 ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،CD/ MP3ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) REPEATﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ( ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ. ) (All ) (Track ) (Off • : CD )(Section A-B ) (Random ) (Track ) (Off • : MP3 ) (Directory ) (All )(Random ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ • • • • | ۲۰ 2014/3/21 8:59:46 ( :ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ) Titleﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ() ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ. ) Chapterﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ() ( :ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﻓﻲ ﻓﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻓﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ. ( :ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ) Playing timeﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ) ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ .ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻛﻣﺭﺟﻊ .ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ. ( :ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ. ) Audioﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ() ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻗﺭﺹ DVDﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ 8ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ. ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 20 ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ) ▼▲ ﺣﺩﺩ ) AUDIOﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺃﻭ ) SUBTITLEﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ( ﺃﻭ ) ANGLEﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ(( ) ◄► ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ( | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺹ ,ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ ﻭﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ. ) S.VOLﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ( ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺭ. ) SMART VOLUME ONﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ( ) SMART VOLUME OFFﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ( S/W LEVEL ) S/W LEVELﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ (S/W ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) S/W LEVELﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ (S/W ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ • • • • ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺑﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ. ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ,ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ )* (smi.ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ (avi.*) DivX ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ. ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﻭﻋﺏ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ 100ﺣﺭﻑ ﺃﺑﺟﺩﻱ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ 50 ﺣﺭﻑ ﺷﺭﻕ ﺃﺳﻳﻭﻱ )ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﺄﻟﻑ ﻣﻥ 2ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻳﺔ(. ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ DivXﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ * smi.ﻭ* sub.ﻭ* srt.ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ 148ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺑﺎﻳﺕ. ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ) P.BASSﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ) DSPﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ(EQ/ DSP/EQ ❏ ) DSPﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ( ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ DSPﻟﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ. ❏ EQ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ "ﺭﻭﻙ" ﺃﻭ "ﺑﻭﺏ" ﺃﻭ "ﻛﻼﺳﻳﻛﻲ" ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ DSP/EQﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ. ﻻ ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ DSP/EQﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ AC3ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ .2.1 ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ) (EQﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻣﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩ ﻭﺇﻓﺭﻳﻘﻳﺎ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ .ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ. P.BASS ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) P.BASSﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﺗﻌﺯﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) P.BASSﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ LPCM ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﺛﻝ MP3ﻭ DivXﻭ CDﻭ.WMA ) GIGAﺟﻳﺟﺎ( ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ۰٥ ( :ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ • ) Subtitleﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ() ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺹ .ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ .ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻗﺭﺹ DVDﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ 32ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ. • ) Angleﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ() ( :ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻗﺭﺹ DVDﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ,ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ. S.VOL GIGA ) FOOTBALLﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ( FOOTBALL ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻼﻋﺏ ﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) FOOTBALLﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ(. ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) FOOTBALLﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ( ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ. ) FOOTBALL MODE ONﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ( ) FOOTBALL MODE OFFﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ( ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ :ﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻌﺏ ﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ. ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ GIGA Soundﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺿﺧﻳﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻳﻧﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻱ) .ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ( | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻳﻌﻣﻝ GIGA Soundﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ LPCMﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ. ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ) GIGAﺟﻳﺟﺎ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ MIC )ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ(. ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۲۱ 2014/3/21 8:59:48 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 21 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ V SURROUND ) V SURROUNDﺇﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ( ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ) Channel Audio 2ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ .(2ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ 2ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ 5.1ﻭﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ. ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) V-SURROUNDﺇﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ( ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ. ) Virtual Surround onﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ( ) Virtual Surround offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ( • ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ :ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ 2ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ 5.1 ﻭﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ .5.1 • ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ :ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ 2ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ) .2ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ(. TV SOUND ) TV SOUNDﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ( . 1ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) FUNCTIONﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ .FM . 2ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ. • ) Preset Tuning 1ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﻟﻳﻑ : (1ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻛﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ .ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ) PRESETﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻕ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ) TUNING/CHﺍﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻑ/ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ( ) (.,ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ. • ) Manual Tuningﺍﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ( :ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ) MANUALﻳﺩﻭﻱ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ TUNING/ ) (.,) CHﺍﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻑ/ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ( ﻟﻠﺗﻭﻟﻳﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ. • ) Automatic Tuningﺍﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( :ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ) MANUALﻳﺩﻭﻱ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) (.,) TUNING/CHﺍﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻑ/ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ( ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) TV SOUNDﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ(. ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ/ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ . 2ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) TV SOUNDﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ( ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) MO/STﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ/ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ( . • ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ، ﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ) STEREOﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ( ﻭ ) MONOﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(. • ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ,ﺣﺩﺩ ) MONOﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ. ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺙ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ٍ . 1ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ HDMIﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ. . 3ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) TV SOUNDﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ(، ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ) TV SOUND ON/OFFﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ( ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ،ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ .D.IN ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ :ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ. ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ :ﻟﻺﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ Anynet+ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝﺑﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ❏ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ: (۱ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. (۲ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ USBﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ. ❏ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺗﺩﻋﻡ) TV SOUND ON/OFFﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﺻﻭﺗﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ( ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯAnynet+ )(HDMI-CEC ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯAnynet+ )(HDMI-CEC ﻏﻳﺭﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ TV Anynet+ )(HDMI-CEC )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﺻﻭ ﺗﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ( )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﺻﻭ ﺗﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ( ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ O O ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ O O ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ O O ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﺛﺎﻝ :ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺫﺍﻋﺔ FM 89.10ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ . 1ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) FUNCTIONﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ .FM . 2ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) TUNING/CHﺗﻭﻟﻳﻑ/ﻗﻧﺎﺓ( ) (.,ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >.<89.10 . 3ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) TUNER MEMORYﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻟﻑ( ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ. • ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. . 4ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ (.,) TUNING/CHﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ 1ﻭ 15ﺭﻗﻣًﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﻡ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ. . 5ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) TUNER MEMORYﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻟﻑ( ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) TUNER MEMORYﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻟﻑ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. • ﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ. . 6ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ،ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ 2ﺇﻟﻰ .5 ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ D.INﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ،TV CEC ONﻭﺇﻻ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ .ARC | ۲۲ 2014/3/21 8:59:50 ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 22 ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ USB ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺿﻳﻑ USB ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ MP3ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ USBﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺫﻱ 5.1ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ USBﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ) CD-DAﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) USB Recordingﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ (USBﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ FMﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ .USB )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ( ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ USBﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ CD-DA . 1ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ. . 2ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ CD-DAﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ. 5V 500mA AUX IN 1 . 3ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ USB RECﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ. • ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) USB RECﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ (USBﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ. • ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ USB RECﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ. - . 1ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ USBﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ. . 2ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) FUNCTIONﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ .USB • ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ USBﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ. . 3ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ► ◄ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ) Videosﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ﺃﻭ ) Photosﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﺃﻭ ) Musicﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ(. • ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ. ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻧﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻧﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ .USB • ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) YELLOWﺃﺻﻔﺭ().(C ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ) REMOVEﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ.• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ .USB | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ USBﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ USBﺑﺑﻁء .ﻭﺇﻻ ،ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ USB ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻑ. ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ USBﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ 25ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ. ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ۰٥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ USB ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ " "FULL RECORDINGﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ. ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ. . 4ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ • ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ USBﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ،ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺟﺩ ﻣﺟﻠﺩًﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩًﺍ ﺍﺳﻣﻪ " "RECORDINGﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ .USBﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ .MP3 • ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ USBﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ FMﺃﻭ ،AUXﺳﺗﺟﺩ ﻣﺟﻠﺩًﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩًﺍ ﺍﺳﻣﻪ " TUNER RECORDINGﺃﻭ "AUX RECORDINGﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ .USBﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ .MP3 | ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ | ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ USBﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ .USB ﻭﺇﻻ ،ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺑﻌﺩ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،USBﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ USBﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،USBﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻝ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ،ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺳﺗﺄﻧﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ. ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ،ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣُﺳﺟﻝ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ 5 ٍ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ USBﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ) .FATﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ NTFSﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ(. ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ USBﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ) MICﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ( .ﻭﺇﻻ ،ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ USBﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ MIC )ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ(. ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ) Speaker selectionﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ TV ) Speakerﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ( ،ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ USB Recording )ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ (USBﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ. ﺳﻳﺗﺭﺗﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ. ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ X3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ) Stopﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ) Volume/ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ(/ ) Muteﻛﺗﻡ() Echo/ﺻﺩﻯ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ .USB ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۲۳ 2014/3/21 8:59:53 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 23 ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺭﺏ ﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ .Samsung Electronics ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ/ﺍﻟﺣﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﺭﺍﺽ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ. • ﻫﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ? • ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ً ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ. ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. • ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﻘﺭﺹ .DVD ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. • ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ D-ROMﻭ DVD-ROMﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ. ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ Play/Pause )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ(. • ﻫﻝ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺭﺻًﺎ ﻣﺷﻭﻫًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺩﻭﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺣﻪ? • ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﻧﻅﻳ ًﻔﺎ. ﻻ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. • ﻝﺍ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳﺔ. • ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ? ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ? • ﻫﻝ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ? ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVDﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ. ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ .ﺣﺩﺩ ) V-SURROUNDﺇﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ( )ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ( ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺕ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ. ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻗﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ 6ﻛﻠﻬﺎ. • • • • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺟﺳﻡ ﺫﻭﻱ 5.1ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺑﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ Dolby .Digital • ﻩﻝ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ " "Dolby Digital 5.1 CHﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ? ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺳﻡ ﺫﻭ 5.1ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺑﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ Dolby Digitalﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺫﻱ 5.1ﻗﻧﺎﺓ. • ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ Dolby Digital 5.1-CHﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ? ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ. • ﻫﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ? • ﻫﻝ ﻧﻔﺩﺕ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ? • ﻫﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ /DVDﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ(؟ • ﺭﻏﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻳﺩﻭﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ. • ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻬﺗﺯ. • • • • ﺍ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺎﺕ. • ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ. ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ/ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺭﻏﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ/ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ. • ﻫﻝ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺭﺻًﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ? | ۲٤ 2014/3/21 8:59:55 ﻩﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ? ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ? ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻣﺗﺳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﻟﻑ? ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻌﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺩﻱء. ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 24 ﺍﻷﻋﺭﺍﺽ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ. • ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ) .ﻣﺛﺎﻝ :ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﻏﺭﻳﺏ(. • ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺳﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ(. ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ )ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ 5 ٍ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ۰٦ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ/ﺍﻟﺣﻝ • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVD 16:9ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ 16:9ﻋﺭﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ LETTER BOX 4:3ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ PAN SCAN 4:3ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ DVD 4:3ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ 4:3ﻓﻘﻁ .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻗﺭﺹ DVDﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ. ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ .ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ. ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ • ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻗﺭﺹ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺛﻭﺍﻥ. ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ 5 ٍ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ " "INITﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ .ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) POWERﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ(. ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ .ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ. ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺑﺙ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ. • ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ? • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ FMﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺟﻳﺩ. ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﻟﻑ FM ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ 2.3ﻛﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ) 430ﻋﺭﺽ( × ) 61ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ) 242ﻋﻣﻕ( ﻣﻠﻡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ +5ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ +35ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ 10ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ 75ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ 60ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ 10ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﻲ 1% ) DVDﻗﺭﺹ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ 12 :ﺳﻡ )ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ( ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ 8 :ﺳﻡ )ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ( ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ/ﺻﻭﺕ HDMI ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ :ﻣﻥ 3.49ﺇﻟﻰ 4.06ﻣﻠﻠﻲ/ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ. ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ )ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( 135 :ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ. ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ :ﻣﻥ 4.8ﺇﻟﻰ 5.6ﻣﻠﻠﻲ/ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ 74 :ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ. ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ :ﻣﻥ 4.8ﺇﻟﻰ 5.6ﻣﻠﻠﻲ/ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ 20 :ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ. (480i) 576i 1ﻗﻧﺎﺓ 1.0 :ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﻭﺓ )ﺣﻣﻝ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ 75ﺃﻭﻡ( )1080p ،1080i ،720p ،576p(480p ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۲٥ 2014/3/21 8:59:56 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 25 ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ 167ﻭﺍﺕ × 3)2ﺃﻭﻡ( ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ 165ﻭﺍﺕ )3ﺃﻭﻡ( ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ 167ﻭﺍﺕ × 3)2ﺃﻭﻡ( ﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ 167ﻭﺍﺕ )3ﺃﻭﻡ( ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ 20ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ 20ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ 65ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ 55ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ) 800(AUXﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ٥٫۱ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ۳ﺃﻭﻡ ۳ﺃﻭﻡ ۳ﺃﻭﻡ ۳ﺃﻭﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ۱٤۰ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ۲۰ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻣﻥ ۱٤۰ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ۲۰ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻣﻥ ۱٤۰ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ۲۰ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻣﻥ ۲۰ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ۱٦۰ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ۸٦ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ/ﻭﺍﺕ/ﻣﺗﺭ ۸٦ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ/ﻭﺍﺕ/ﻣﺗﺭ ۸٦ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ/ﻭﺍﺕ/ﻣﺗﺭ ۸۸ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ/ﻭﺍﺕ/ﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺭ ۱٦۷ﻭﺍﺕ ۱٦۷ﻭﺍﺕ ۱٦٥ﻭﺍﺕ ۱٦۷ﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻝ ۳۳٤ﻭﺍﺕ ۳۳٤ﻭﺍﺕ ۳۳۰ﻭﺍﺕ ۳۳٤ﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ xﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ xﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ( )ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ :ﻣﻠﻡ( ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ HT-F456K ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ۷۱ × ۱۰٥۳ × ۸۹ﻣﻠﻡ *ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ۲۲۹ × ۲۲۹ : ۷۱ × ۱۰٥۳ × ۸۹ﻣﻠﻡ *ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ۲۲۹ × ۲۲۹ : ۷۰ × ۷۷ × ۲۲۸ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ۳٥۰ × ۳۹۰ × ۲۱٤ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ )ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ :ﻛﺟﻡ( HT-F456K ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ۳٫۱٦ ۳٫۱٦ ۰٫٤۹ ٥٫۹۲ * :ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻳﺔ • -ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ Samsung Electronics Co., Ltdﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ. • -ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ. • -ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ. • -ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ،ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. | ۲٦ 2014/3/21 8:59:57 ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 26 ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ OpenSSL ﺗﻅﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ OpenSSLﺗﺣﺕ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ ،ﺃﻱ ﺗﺳﺭﻱ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ OpenSSLﻭﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ SSLeayﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ .ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ .ﻭﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺻﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ .BSDﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑـ OpenSSLﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ [email protected] ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ OpenSSL Copyright (c) 1998-2007ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ .OpenSSL Projectﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ. ﻳُﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ ،ﻣﻊ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍﺋﻪ ،ﺑﺷﺭﻁ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: .۱ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺑﺈﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ. .۲ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺛﺎﺋﻕ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ. .۳ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻹﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ" :ﻳﺿﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ OpenSSL Project ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ http://www.openssl.org/) .OpenSSL "(Toolkit .٤ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻳﻥ " "OpenSSL Toolkitﻭ""OpenSSL Project ﻹﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺗﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻭﻳﺞ ﻟﻬﺎ. ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻲ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑـ [email protected] .٥ﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳُﻁﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺗﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺳﻡ " "OpenSSLﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ " "OpenSSLﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﻣﻥ OpenSSL .Project .٦ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ" :ﻳﺿﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ OpenSSL Projectﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ "(http://www.openssl.org/) .OpenSSL Toolkit ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ " OpenSSL PROJECTﺑﺣﺎﻟﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﻫﻧﺔ" ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ OpenSSL PROJECTﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻣﻧﻳﺔ ،ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﺭ ،ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﻭﻳﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ .ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ OpenSSL PROJECTﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻫﻣﻭﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺔ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﺭ، ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺩﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ( ،ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻭﻋﻬﺎ ،ﻭﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻅﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ،ﺳﻭﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺎﻗﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻱ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻹﻫﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺭ( ﺗﻧﺷﺄ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ. ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﻛﺗﺑﻪ ﺇﻳﺭﻳﻙ ﻳﻭﻧﺞ ) .([email protected]ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﻛﺗﺑﻪ ﺗﻳﻡ ﻫﺩﺳﻭﻥ ).([email protected] ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ SSLeayﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ Copyright (C) 1995-1998ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ([email protected]) Eric Young ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ. ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ cﻛﺗﺑﻪ ﺇﻳﺭﻳﻙ ﻳﻭﻧﺞ ).([email protected] ﺗﻣﺕ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ .Netscapes SSL ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺑﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺟﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ. ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ،ﻟﻛﻭﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ،RC4، RSA، lhash، DESﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ،ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ .SSL ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ SSLﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻠﻛﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﻡ ﻫﺩﺳﻭﻥ ).([email protected] ﺗﻅﻝ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻣﻠﻙ ﺇﻳﺭﻳﻙ ﻳﻭﻧﺞ ﻭﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺣﻕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﻧﺷﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ،ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺇﻳﺭﻳﻙ ﻳﻭﻧﺞ ﻟﻘﺏ ﻣﺅﻟﻑ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ .ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺻﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺹ( ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ. ﻳُﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ ،ﻣﻊ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍﺋﻪ ،ﺑﺷﺭﻁ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: .۱ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺑﺈﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ. .۲ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺛﺎﺋﻕ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ. .۳ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻹﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ" :ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﻛﺗﺑﻪ ﺇﻳﺭﻳﻙ ﻳﻭﻧﺞ )eay@cryptsoft. "(comﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ 'ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ' ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ .(-: .٤ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ) Windowsﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﺗﻘﺔ ﻣﻧﻪ( ﻣﻥ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ( ،ﻻ ﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻗﺭﺍﺭ" :ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﻛﺗﺑﻪ ﺗﻳﻡ ﻫﺩﺳﻭﻥ )"([email protected] ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺇﻳﺭﻳﻙ ﻳﻭﻧﺞ "ﺑﺣﺎﻟﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﻫﻧﺔ" ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻣﻧﻳﺔ ،ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﺭ ،ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﻭﻳﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ .ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻫﻣﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺔ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﺭ ،ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺩﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ( ،ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻭﻋﻬﺎ ،ﻭﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻅﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ،ﺳﻭﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺎﻗﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻱ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻹﻫﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺭ( ﺗﻧﺷﺄ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ. ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﻷﻱ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻣﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﺗﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ .ﺃﻱ ،ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻧﺳﺦ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ ]ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ GNUﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ[. ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ | ۲۷ 2014/3/21 9:00:00 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 27 ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺣﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡSAMSUNG ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ،Samsung ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ .SAMSUNG ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺯﺑﺎﺋﻥ Asia Pacific ` AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND CHINA 13003362 603 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) 400-810-5858 HONG KONG (852) 3698 4698 INDIA INDONESIA JAPAN MALAYSIA PHILIPPINES SINGAPORE THAILAND TAIWAN VIETNAM MENA ` U.A.E OMAN KUWAIT BAHRAIN QATAR 1800 3000 8282 - Toll Free 1800 266 8282 - Toll Free 30308282 - Non Toll Free 0800112888 021-56997777 0120-327-527 1800-88-9999 1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT] 1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline and Mobile] 02-4222111 [Other landline] 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 0-2689-3232, 1800-29-3232 0800-32-9999 1800 588 889 SYRIA IRAN MOROCCO 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 183-2255 (183-CALL) 8000-4726 800-2255 (800-CALL) 08000-726786 16580 021 36 11 00 0800-Samsung (72678) 80-1000-12 0800-22273 0665777444 18252273 021-8255 080 100 2255 SAUDI ARABIA 920021230 EGYPT ALGERIA PAKISTAN TUNISIA JORDAN TURKEY Africa ` NIGERIA GHANA COTE D’ IVOIRE SENEGAL CAMEROON KENYA UGANDA TANZANIA RWANDA BURUNDI DRC SUDAN SOUTH AFRICA BOTSWANA NAMIBIA ZAMBIA MOZAMBIQUE 02683S-HT-F456K-ZN-ARA-0321.indd 28 444 77 11 0800-726-7864 0800-10077 0302-200077 8000 0077 800-00-0077 7095- 0077 0800 545 545 0800 300 300 0685 88 99 00 9999 200 499999 1969 0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 8007260000 08 197 267 864 0211 350370 847267864 / 827267864 ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ www.samsung.com/au/support www.samsung.com/nz/support www.samsung.com/cn/support www.samsung.com/hk/support (Chinese) www.samsung.com/hk_en/support (English) www.samsung.com/in/support www.samsung.com/id/support www.samsung.com/jp /support www.samsung.com/my /support www.samsung.com/ph /support www.samsung.com/sg /support www.samsung.com/th /support www.samsung.com/tw /support www.samsung.com/vn /support www.samsung.com/ae/support (English) www.samsung.com/ae_ar/support (Arabic) www.samsung.com/eg /support www.samsung.com/n_africa /support www.samsung.com/pk /support www.samsung.com/n_africa /support www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English) www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English) www.samsung.com/iran /support www.samsung.com/n_africa /support www.samsung.com/sa /support www.samsung.com/sa_en/support (English) www.samsung.com/tr/support www.samsung.com/africa_en/support www.samsung.com/africa_fr /support www.samsung.com/support www.samsung.com/support 2014/3/21 9:00:01